Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economicsat 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i. Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii. Learn (A) and work independently;
iii. Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv. Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi. Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii. Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA019 |
Accounting in Context |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA025 |
Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB015 |
Company Law |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Three modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSB007 |
Financial Reporting |
10 |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSC008 |
Strategic Management Accounting: structure, processes and roles |
10 |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30*.
Group 1
BSC020, BSC030
Group 2
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSC009 |
Strategic Management Accounting & Performance |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*:
Group 1:
BSC012, BSC016, BSC018, BSC025, BSC042
Group 2:
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
* Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists in Semester 1 and Semester 2.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSc DPS/ BSc DIntS |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 2012/2013 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economicsat 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown in the tables below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self- motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Learn (A) and work independently;
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
- Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
- Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting Fundamentals (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA025 |
Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
BSA100 |
IT for Professional Development |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA006 |
Personal Effectiveness |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting Fundamentals (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA018 |
Introduction to Management Accounting |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB015 |
Company Law |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Three modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSB007 |
Financial Reporting |
10 |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSC008 |
Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles |
10 |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30*.
Group 1
BSC020, BSC030
Group 2
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Advanced Financial Reporting (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSC009 |
Strategic Management Accounting & Performance |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*:
Group 1:
BSC012, BSC016, BSC018, BSC025, BSC042
Group 2:
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
* Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists in Semester 1 and Semester 2.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Automotive Dealership Management (2004 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institute of the Motor Industry Chartered Management Institute |
Final award | BSc |
Programme title | Automotive Dealership Management |
Programme code | BSUB91 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is a minimum of six semesters with a maximum of ten. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Admission to the programme is based on either obtaining a minimum of two A’ levels or through having practical experience. The candidates entering based on practical experience will have to complete three reasoning tests (verbal, numerical and abstract) and a competency self-assessment, as well as provide personal information relating to their background, experience, previous training and qualifications. This information is combined to produce an admission recommendation for the candidate. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, human resource management, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
- The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including performance management and financial analysis and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA600 |
Foundations of Management |
20 |
BSA605 |
Automotive Retail Environment |
10 |
BSA610 |
Operations Management 1 |
10 |
BSA621† |
Work-Based Assignment 1 : Automotive Retail Environment |
20 |
BSA622 |
Marketing 1 |
20 |
BSA630 |
Human Resource Management 1 |
20 |
BSA635† |
Work-Based Assignment 2 : Operations Management |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB601 |
Accounting and Financial Management 1 |
20 |
BSB602 |
Accounting and Financial Management 2 |
10 |
BSB610 |
Operations Management 2 |
10 |
BSB621† |
Work-Based Assignment 3 : Marketing |
20 |
BSB622† |
Work-Based Assignment 4 : Human Resource Management |
20 |
BSB630 |
Marketing 2 |
20 |
BSB635 |
Human Resource Management 2 |
20 |
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC621† |
Work-Based Assignments 5 : Accounting and Financial Management |
20 |
BSC622† |
Work-Based Assignments 6 : Strategic Dealership Management |
20 |
BSC640 |
Research Project Management |
20 |
BSC645 |
Strategic Dealership Management |
20 |
BSC650* |
Project |
40 |
* by Distance Learning
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- Candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part A modules as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part A;
- Candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B modules as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B;
- To qualify for the award of a degree, candidates must accumulate at lease 100 credits in Part C as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in part C.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period as appropriate.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 50: Part C 50, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA035 |
Introduction to Banking |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA036 |
Banking Law and Practice |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Busines |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB030 |
Marketing |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
BSB067 |
Business Lending |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
BSC044 |
Principles of Strategic Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC042 |
Corporate and Wholesale Banking |
10 |
BSC045 |
Strategy in Banking |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies |
Final award | BSc/ BSc DPS/ BSc DIntS |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting Fundamentals (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA035 |
Introduction to Banking |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
BSA100 |
IT for Professional Development |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA006 |
Personal Effectiveness |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting Fundamentals (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA036 |
Banking Securities |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB030 |
Marketing |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
BSB067 |
Business Lending |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
BSC044 |
Principles of Strategic Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC042 |
Corporate and Wholesale Banking |
10 |
BSC045 |
Strategy in Banking |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc DPS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or eight semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L1NK |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
- Analysis and decision making.
- Communication.
- Numeracy and computation.
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
- Independent study and group work.
- Time management.
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
Wgt |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSA025 Introduction to Law |
10 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules: NONE |
|
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
Wgt |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only) (Optional)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules |
Wgt |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing |
20 |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules |
|
ECC005 Industrial Economics |
20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules;
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- For Part C: Students who commenced their studies prior to 2010 must obtain 100 credits at 40% or above, plus a minimum mark of 20% in any remaining modules, in accordance with Regulation XX. Students registering onto the programme from 2010 onwards will be required to obtain 100 credits at 40% or above, plus a minimum mark of 30% in the remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for re-assessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with the Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period. Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies (Singapore) (Aug 2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB70 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businesseconomicsandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
The BSc Business Studies programme is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, human resources and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 80)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC665 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 2 from 3. Total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies (Singapore) (Aug 2008 to July 2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB70 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businesseconomicsandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience.
The BSc Business Studies programme is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, human resources and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 80)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC665 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 2 from 3. Total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part A as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in part A.
- To progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
- To qualify for the award of a degree, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part C as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part C.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in Productivity and Standards Board’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies (Singapore) (pre- August 2008 Part B entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB70 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businesseconomicsandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience.
The BSc Business Studies programme is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, human resources and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Purchasing and Operations Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 80)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC665 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 2 from 3. Total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part A as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in part A.
- To progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
- To qualify for the award of a degree, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part C as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part C.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in Productivity and Standards Board’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with Banking and Finance (Singapore) (Aug 11 entry to July 13 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Banking and Finance |
Programme code | BSUB75 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is three years. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | The majority of students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this education system and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Academy. Therefore, students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma with average B/C grade c) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma in Business Studies, who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Academy. However, the Singapore Programme Director is responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. Applicants from outside the Singaporean education system and/or applicants with other education qualifications will be considered on a case-by-case basis. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme which allows students to focus on particular functions within the business environment, namely banking and finance, and to place these functions and their operations in context within the wider business and management field;
- Provide a relevant and practical programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience, particularly in the areas of banking and finance;
- Develop teaching and learning in response to the needs of the business community;
- Enhance the employability of our graduates through building on their prior studies and their experience in commerce and industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The benchmark statement for Finance (F)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate, including the institutional framework necessary for understanding the role, operation and markets of financial institutions (B&M, F);
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context (B&M);
- The major theoretical tools and theories of finance and their relevance and application to practical problems (F);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level for banks and their clients within a dynamic (international) environment (B&M amended);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice in banking, finance and wider business environments.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should have achieved the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative and economic modelling techniques to business and finance problems and phenomena;
- Analyse and draw reasoned conclusions concerning structured and unstructured problems in the context of business, banking and finance (F amended)
- Apply understanding to a variety of working environments and adapt and implement taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of Internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- Work effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide, motivate and resolve conflict with other team members;
- Use numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Demonstrate a clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB690 |
The Business of Banking |
20 |
|
BSB695 |
Financial Systems, Markets and Institutions |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose one from two). Total modular weight 20
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC697 |
International Financial Management |
20 |
|
BSC695 |
International Banking |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with HRM (Singapore) (August 13 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Human Resource Management |
Programme code | BSUB80 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | The majority of students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this education system and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Corporation. Therefore, students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma with average B/C grade c) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma in Business Studies, who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Corporation. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in management;
- In addition to the above, produce high quality students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for effective Human Resource Management within an organisation;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Recognise the importance of integration of HRM activities with the wider business strategy;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
The BSc Business Studies with HRM is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, HRM and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The behaviour, management, development, selection and remuneration of human resources within organisations
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Understand and apply the concepts within the specialised field of human resource management;
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in an HRM context, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use effective oral + written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development + Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB680 |
The Dynamics of Employment Relations |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 1 from 2. Total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
|
BSC690 |
Human Resource Development |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with HRM (Singapore) (Aug 08-Jul 11 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Human Resource Management |
Programme code | BSUB80 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | The majority of students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this education system and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Corporation. Therefore, students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma with average B/C grade c) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma in Business Studies, who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Corporation. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality students with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in management;
- In addition to the above, produce high quality students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for effective Human Resource Management within an organisation;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Recognise the importance of integration of HRM activities with the wider business strategy;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
- Develop teaching and learning in response to the needs of the business community;
- Enhance the employability of our graduates through building on their prior studies and their experience in commerce and industry;
- Attract well-qualified applicants from a variety of educational and cultural backgrounds;
- Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- Enhance the learning framework of students by ensuring a transfer of practical, experiential knowledge amongst the students themselves
The BSc Business Studies with HRM is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, HRM and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The behaviour, management, development, selection and remuneration of human resources within organisations
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The process of management and decision making in an international context;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services;
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications;
- The relevance of entrepreneurship, innovation and the small business sector in national and international economies;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Understand and apply the concepts within the specialised field of human resource management;
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- Make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of Internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in an HRM context, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Management of their own personal development;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Effective use of information and communication technologies;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB680 |
The Dynamics of Employment Relations |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 1 from 2. Total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
|
BSC690 |
Human Resource Development |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part A to Part B, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part A as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in part A.
- To progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
- To qualify for the award of a degree, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part C as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part C.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or eight semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L100 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
- On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules (at least 2 must be selected): |
|
ECC024 Econometric Modelling 1 (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) |
20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Module |
|
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with the Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters or 8 semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L1N4 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
|
|
Semester 1 COMPULSORY MODULES |
|
BSA017 Financial Accounting |
20 |
Semester 2 COMPULSORY MODULES |
|
BSA025 Introduction to law |
10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context |
10 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
Semester 1 and 2
COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
BSB005 Management Accounting A |
20 |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance |
20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System |
20 |
Semester 1
COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
BSB015 Company Law |
10 |
Semester 2
COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
BSB007 Intermediate Financial Accounting |
10 |
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
COMPULSORY MODULES
Semester 1 and 2
BSC005 Advanced Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSC010 Management Accounting and Control |
20 |
Semester 1
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing |
20 |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
Semester 2
ECC005 Industrial Economics |
20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less then 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either 6 semesters or 8 semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L1HG |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change |
20 |
Semester 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: GYA102 Geographies of Identity |
20 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
Semester 1 and Semester 2
COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
Semester 1 |
|
ECONOMICS COMPULSORY MODULE: | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES: (choose 20 weight) |
|
GYC107 Regional Geography of the UK |
20 |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation |
20 |
GYC214 Geographies of Children and Youth |
10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home |
10 |
Semester 2 |
|
GEOGRAPHY MODULES: (choose 20 weight) |
|
GYC205 Central America: Dependency and Development |
10 |
GYC325 Geographies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules..
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam).
If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either 6 semesters or 8 semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L1M1 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena |
10 |
|
|
Semester 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government |
10 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
Semester 1 & Semester 2
COMPULSORY MODULES: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics (1&2) |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics (1&2) |
20 |
EUB628 Political Thought: Text and Analysis |
20 |
EUB604 Comparative European Politics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
Semester 1
POLITICS MODULES: (Choose ONE) |
|
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism |
20 |
EUC607 The EU and the United States |
20 |
EUC621 Germany in Europe |
20 |
EUC627 Intelligence and National Security |
20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics |
20 |
EUC631 Yugoslavia: Its 20th Century |
20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics |
20 |
EUC670 Varieties of Capitalism |
20 |
EUC602 Nationalism |
20 |
EUC662 Migration, Immigration and the UK today |
20 |
Semester 2 |
|
POLITICS MODULES: (Choose ONE) |
|
EUC609 Spanish-Latin American Relations |
20 |
EUC629 South African Politics and Society |
20 |
EUC658 Art, Politics and Society |
20 |
EUC664 Politics and Religion |
20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics |
20 |
EUC668 The Politics and Foreign Politics of the Nordic Countries |
20 |
EUC672 The EU and the Global Political Economy |
20 |
Semester 1 Economics Compulsory Module |
|
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules..
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above)
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above) .
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB023 |
Macroeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB050 |
International Business |
10 |
BSB137 |
Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above) subject to School approval.
Semester 2
EITHER
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB200 |
International Semester |
60 |
OR
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB024 |
International Economics |
10 |
BSB052 |
International Management |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB086 |
International Employment Relations |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30) from:
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC051 |
International Corporate Governance and Firms |
10 |
BSC105 |
International HRM |
10 |
BSC115 |
International Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 9 or 11) module.
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part C Semester 1 with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they are registered to take a total of 60 credits in Semester 2.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC053 |
International Negotiations |
10 |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 10 or 12) module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also;
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
BSA100 |
IT for Professional Development |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the BusinessSchool’s catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module at the appropriate level.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA006 |
Personal Effectiveness |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the BusinessSchool’s catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module at the appropriate level.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB023 |
Macroeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB050 |
International Business |
10 |
BSB137 |
Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above) subject to School approval.
Semester 2
EITHER
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB200 |
International Semester |
60 |
OR
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB024 |
International Economics |
10 |
BSB052 |
International Management |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB086 |
International Employment Relations |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30) from:
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC051 |
International Corporate Governance and Firms |
10 |
BSC105 |
International HRM |
10 |
BSC115 |
International Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 9 or 11) module.
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part C Semester 1 with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they are registered to take a total of 60 credits in Semester 2.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC053 |
International Negotiations |
10 |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 10 or 12) module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or eight semesters if students undertake a year abroad (Part I) which occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Directors(Economics). |
UCAS code | L115 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computatio
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how to abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organisation and informative presentation of data. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional Year Abroad (8 semester programme only)
During the Year Abroad students will undertake a programme of study as specified by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 Compulsory Module | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules (at least 2 must be selected) |
|
ECC003 International Money and Finance (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC031 International Trade (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less then 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above).
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB100 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB110 |
Data Analysis for Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC070 |
Technology in Business and Society |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50*.
Group 1: Analytics for Management; Business Forecasting; Business Optimisation
Group 2: Modules from the Business Catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*.
Group 1: Business Dynamics; Consulting Practice and Decision Making
Group 2: Modules from the Business Catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists in Semester 1 and Semester 2.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
BSA100 |
IT for Professional Development |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the BusinessSchool’s catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module at the appropriate level.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA006 |
Personal Effectiveness |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the BusinessSchool’s catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module at the appropriate level.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB100 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB110 |
Data Analysis for Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC070 |
Technology in Business and Society |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50*
Group 1: Analytics for Management; Business Forecasting; Business Optimisation
Group 2: Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*
Group 1: Business Dynamics; Consulting Practice and Decision Making
Group 2: Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme
* Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
|
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
|
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
|
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
|
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
|
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
|
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
|
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
|
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
|
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB125 |
Retail and Service Operations |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB131 |
Visual Merchandising |
10 |
BSB132 |
Retail Buying |
10 |
BSB135 |
Consumer Behaviour |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC110 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
10 |
BSC180 |
Retailing Logistics |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total credit weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC170 |
Retailing Strategy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Note: Students need to choose at least one of the following options: BSC115 International Marketing; BSC117 Services Marketing; BSC124 Marketing Communications
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/retailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
BSA100 |
IT for Professional Development |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA006 |
Personal Effectiveness |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB125 |
Retail and Service Operations |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB131 |
Visual Merchandising |
10 |
BSB132 |
Retail Buying |
10 |
BSB135 |
Consumer Behaviour |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
2.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
2.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC110 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
10 |
BSC180 |
Retailing Logistics |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total credit weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC170 |
Retailing Strategy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Note: students need to choose at least one of the following options: BSC115 International Marketing; BSC117 Services Marketing; BSC124 Marketing Communications
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economicsat 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA019 |
Accounting in Context |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA025 |
Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB015 |
Company Law |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Three modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB005 |
Management Accounting (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSB007 |
Financial Reporting |
10 |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSC008 |
Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles |
10 |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30*.
Group 1
BSC020, BSC030
Group 2
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC005 |
Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSC009 |
Strategic Management Accounting & Performance |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*:
Group 1:
BSC012, BSC016, BSC018, BSC025, BSC042
Group 2:
Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
* Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists in Semester 1 and Semester 2.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA035 |
Introduction to Banking |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
|
|
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA036 |
Banking Law and Practice |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Busines |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB030 |
Marketing |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
BSB067 |
Business Lending |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC015 |
Financial Management and Corporate Policy |
10 |
BSC044 |
Principles of Strategic Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC042 |
Corporate and Wholesale Banking |
10 |
BSC045 |
Strategy in Banking |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total weight of 40 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above)
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above) .
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB023 |
Macroeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB050 |
International Business |
10 |
BSB137 |
Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above) subject to Schoolapproval.
Semester 2
EITHER
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB200 |
International Semester |
60 |
OR
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB024 |
International Economics |
10 |
BSB052 |
International Management |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB086 |
International Employment Relations |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30) from:
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC051 |
International Corporate Governance and Firms |
10 |
BSC105 |
International HRM |
10 |
BSC115 |
International Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 9 or 11) module.
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part C Semester 1 with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they are registered to take a total of 60 credits in Semester 2.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC053 |
International Negotiations |
10 |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30, from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme, or any available EUL (level 10 or 12) module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the Internatiional Context |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above).
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB100 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB110 |
Data Analysis for Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC070 |
Technology in Business and Society |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50*
Group 1: Analytics for Managememt; Business Forecasting, Business Optimisation
Group 2: Modules from the Business Catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC055 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Modules with a total modular weight of 40*
Group 1: Business Dynamics; Consulting Practice and Decision Making.
Group 2: Modules from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from the Group 1 lists.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10
|
|
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
|
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
|
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
|
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
|
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
|
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
|
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
|
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
|
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
|
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB125 |
Retail and Service Operations |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB131 |
Visual Merchandising |
10 |
BSB132 |
Retail Buying |
10 |
BSB135 |
Consumer Behaviour |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 30)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC110 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
10 |
BSC180 |
Retailing Logistics |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total credit weight 30)
Modules with a total modular weight of 30 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 10)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC170 |
Retailing Strategy |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Modules with a total modular weight of 50 from the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme.
Note: students need to choose at least one of the following options: BSC115 International Marketing; BSC117 Services Marketing; BSC124 Marketing Communications
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with HRM (Singapore) (Aug 2011-Jul 2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Human Resource Management |
Programme code | BSUB80 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | The majority of students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this education system and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Corporation. Therefore, students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma with average B/C grade c) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma in Business Studies, who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Corporation. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in management;
- In addition to the above, produce high quality students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for effective Human Resource Management within an organisation;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Recognise the importance of integration of HRM activities with the wider business strategy;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
The BSc Business Studies with HRM is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, HRM and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The behaviour, management, development, selection and remuneration of human resources within organisations
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Understand and apply the concepts within the specialised field of human resource management;
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in an HRM context, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business report;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB680 |
The Dynamics of Employment Relations |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 1 from 2. Total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
|
BSC690 |
Human Resource Development |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with Banking and Finance (Singapore) (August 2013 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Banking and Finance |
Programme code | BSUB75 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is three years. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | The majority of students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this education system and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Academy. Therefore, students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma with average B/C grade c) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma in Business Studies, who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Academy. However, the Singapore Programme Director is responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. Applicants from outside the Singaporean education system and/or applicants with other education qualifications will be considered on a case-by-case basis. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme which allows students to focus on particular functions within the business environment, namely banking and finance, and to place these functions and their operations in context within the wider business and management field;
- Provide a relevant and practical programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience, particularly in the areas of banking and finance;
- Develop teaching and learning in response to the needs of the business community;
- Enhance the employability of our graduates through building on their prior studies and their experience in commerce and industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The benchmark statement for Finance (F)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate, including the institutional framework necessary for understanding the role, operation and markets of financial institutions (B&M, F);
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context (B&M);
- The major theoretical tools and theories of finance and their relevance and application to practical problems (F);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level for banks and their clients within a dynamic (international) environment (B&M amended);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice in banking, finance and wider business environments.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should have achieved the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative and economic modelling techniques to business and finance problems and phenomena;
- Analyse and draw reasoned conclusions concerning structured and unstructured problems in the context of business, banking and finance (F amended)
- Apply understanding to a variety of working environments and adapt and implement taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of Internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- Work effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide, motivate and resolve conflict with other team members;
- Use numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Demonstrate a clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB690 |
The Business of Banking |
20 |
|
BSB695 |
Financial Systems, Markets and Institutions |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose one from two). Total modular weight 20
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development + Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC697 |
International Financial Management |
20 |
|
BSC695 |
International Banking |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies (Singapore) (Aug 2011 to July 2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB70 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businesseconomicsandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience.
The BSc Business Studies programme is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, human resources and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources.
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media;
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
Candidates holding the PSBAcademy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Human Resource Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Organisational Behaviour and Management”, BSA650 without taking any form of assessment in that module.
Candidates holding the PSB Academy / PSB-IPT Advanced Diploma in Marketing and Sales Management may elect to have a mark of 55% inserted as their module mark for “Introduction to Marketing”, BSA665, without taking any form of assessment in that module.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 80)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC665 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 2 from 3. Total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L100 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
- On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules (at least 2 must be selected): |
|
ECC024 Econometric Modelling 1 (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) |
20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Module |
|
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with the Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A candidate whose Final Year Project is failed with a mark of 30-39% may be permitted to submit a revised version of the original piece of work for the purpose of re-assessment. A candidate whose Project is failed with a mark of less than 30% must submit a Project on a new topic.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L1N4 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
|
|
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSA017 Financial Accounting |
20 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSA025 Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context |
10 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
Semester 1 and 2
Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSB005 Management Accounting A |
20 |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance |
20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System |
20 |
Semester 1
Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSB015 Company Law |
10 |
Semester 2
Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSB007 Intermediate Financial Accounting |
10 |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
COMPULSORY MODULES
Semester 1 and 2
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice |
20 |
Semester 1
ECC004 Financial Econometrics and Asset Pricing |
20 |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting |
10 |
Semester 2
ECC005 Industrial Economics |
20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives |
20 |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice |
10 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less then 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L1HG |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules: |
|
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change |
20 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules: GYA102 Geographies of Identity |
20 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
Semester 1 and Semester 2
Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
Semester 1 |
|
Ecomonics Compulsory Module: | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
: (choose 20 weight) |
|
GYC107 Regional Geography of the UK |
20 |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation |
20 |
GYC214 Geographies of Children and Youth |
10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home |
10 |
Semester 2 |
|
Geography Modules: (choose 20 weight) |
|
GYC205 Central America: Dependency and Development |
10 |
GYC325 Geographies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules..
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam).
If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A candidate whose Final Year Project is failed with a mark of 30-39% may be permitted to submit a revised version of the original piece of work for the purpose of re-assessment. A candidate whose Project is failed with a mark of less than 30% must submit a Project on a new topic.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L1M1 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computation
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules: |
|
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena |
10 |
|
|
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government |
10 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
Semester 1 & Semester 2
Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics (1&2) |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics (1&2) |
20 |
EUB630 British Politics |
20 |
EUB601 The European Union |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
Semester 1 Economics Compulsory Module |
|
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules..
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students will be eligible to enter to the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A candidate whose Final Year Project is failed with a mark of 30-39% may be permitted to submit a revised version of the original piece of work for the purpose of re-assessment. A candidate whose Project is failed with a mark of less than 30% must submit a Project on a new topic.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc DPS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L1NK |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
- Analysis and decision making.
- Communication.
- Numeracy and computation.
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
- Independent study and group work.
- Time management.
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
Wgt |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules: |
|
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
BSA025 Introduction to Law |
10 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
Wgt |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 Compulsory Modules |
Wgt |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing |
20 |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills in Economics |
20 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Modules |
|
ECC005 Industrial Economics |
20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules;
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- For Part C: Students who commenced their studies prior to 2010 must obtain 100 credits at 40% or above, plus a minimum mark of 20% in any remaining modules, in accordance with Regulation XX. Students registering onto the programme from 2010 onwards will be required to obtain 100 credits at 40% or above, plus a minimum mark of 30% in the remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for re-assessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with the Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of reassessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period. Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A candidate whose Final Year Project is failed with a mark of 30-39% may be permitted to submit a revised version of the original piece of work for the purpose of re-assessment. A candidate whose Project is failed with a mark of less than 30% must submit a Project on a new topic.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2012 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School. |
UCAS code | L115 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
- Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
- The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
- Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
- Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
- Analysis and decision making
- Communication
- Numeracy and computatio
- IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills
- Independent study and group work
- Time management
- Problem solving
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
- Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how to abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
- Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
- Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organisation and informative presentation of data. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
- Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part A Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics |
20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1 Compulsory Module | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Modules (at least 2 must be selected) |
|
ECC003 International Money and Finance (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC031 International Trade (Semester 1) |
20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) |
20 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the Part.
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- In order to progress from Part A to Part B candidates must accumulate 100 credits and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
- In order to progress from Part B to Part C candidates must accumulate at least 200 credits including at least 100 from degree level modules taken in Part B and obtain a minimum of 30% in remaining modules.
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX of the University Regulations for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo reassessment in the University's Special Assessment Period.
Final year students are eligible to enter the University’s Special Assessment Period providing they have accumulated at least 60 credits in Part C as above.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less then 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
A candidate whose Final Year Project is failed with a mark of 30-39% may be permitted to submit a revised version of the original piece of work for the purpose of re-assessment. A candidate whose Project is failed with a mark of less than 30% must submit a Project on a new topic.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the placement stream. A Diploma in International Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the Study Abroad or Split Stream.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business Studies (pre 2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) |
Final award | BSc/BSc + DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is normally either 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
Candidates must take a total modular weight of 120 in each Part, with a minimum modular weight of 50 in each semester, taking into account both compulsory and optional modules.
|
Title |
Modular weight |
BSA505 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 |
Financial Reporting |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
ISA303 |
Management Problem Solving |
10 |
ISA309 |
Studying Information Science |
10 |
BSA570 |
Quantitative Methods for Business |
10 |
Semester 2 - COMPULSORY MODULES (total weight 60)
|
Title |
Modular weight |
BSA506 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA572 |
Statistics and Modelling for Management |
10 |
BSA526 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
ISA007 |
Retrieval and Organisation of Information |
10 |
ISA307 |
Website Design |
10 |
ISA310 |
The Information Society |
10 |
4.2 Part B
Semester 1
|
Title |
Modular weight |
COMPULSORY MODULES (total weight 40) |
|
|
BSB580 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB560 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
ISB404 |
People-Centred Information Service Design |
10 |
ISB304 |
Information and Knowledge Management 1 |
10 |
OPTIONAL MODULES (total weight 10 or 20) ONE or TWO of the following: |
|
|
ISB301 |
Informatics and Systems |
10 |
BSB555 |
Organisation Studies |
10 |
Semester 2
|
Title |
Modular weight |
COMPULSORY MODULES (total weight 40) |
|
|
BSB572 |
Management Science Methods |
10 |
BSB562 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
ISB010 |
Research Methods |
10 |
ISB025 |
Information Retrieval |
10 |
ISB303 |
Database Design |
10 |
and ONE of the following: |
|
|
BSB550 |
Company Finance |
10 |
BSB590 |
The Contemporary Business Environment |
10 |
OPTIONAL MODULES (total weight 0 or 10) |
|
|
ISB302 |
Systems Modelling |
10 |
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme.
4.4 Part C - Degree modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (modular weight 20)
|
Title |
Modular weight |
BSC570 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
Semester 2
ii) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 20)
|
Title |
Modular weight |
BSC575 |
Leadership and Interpersonal Skills |
10 |
BSC072 |
Strategic Information Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme(typically management modules).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics and Management
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS/ BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics and Management |
Programme code | ECUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either six semesters or eight semesters. The option of eight semesters has four streams. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Deputy Director of Learning and Teaching (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with specialised training in the core aspects of economics and management particularly relevant to industry and commerce.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both economics and in management.
- to provide students with core concepts in management and business.
- To equip students with the relevant tools to understand how firms behave, compete and implement strategies with reference to both their internal and external environment.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the domestic and international economy and to understand the impact of the economic environment on a range of business settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- to enable data handling skills relating to the analysis on information available and generated by modern business in order for managers to make effective and timely decisions.
- to develop communication and interpersonal skills and your ability to work in groups developing practical skills essential for working in a business environment.
- to provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for a career in the economics and management professions.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of managerial problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To enhance students’ career and employment prospects on graduating by developing a range of transferable skills embedded in the programme.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Benchmark Statements for General Business and Management
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, within the Economics portion of the programme students will learn::
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, that may possibly include econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of microeconomic and macroeconomic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial policy. Related to this, they should have the ability to evaluate government economic policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies and the impact on the business environment.
Within the Management portion of the degree will develop an understanding of:
K4. organisations; their internal structures and their management, including the management of human resources, financial resources and information systems;
K5. the external environment within which organisations operate; the markets for goods, services and finance; customers and the implications for marketing;
K6. analytical frameworks, techniques and processes; business policy and strategy; development of policy and strategy; current issues in strategic management
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstract and synthesise information.
C2. Develop problem-solving and decision-making skills using the analytical tools of deduction and induction reasoning.
C3. Critically evaluate and interpret a range of evidence, including data and text.
C4. Framing an economic problem within the merits of contrasting theories, explanations and arguments.
C5. Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios
C6. Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
C7. Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions
C8. Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Combine and interpret different types of evidence using appropriate techniques;
P3. Use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures;
P4. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
P5. Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Structure
4.1.1 Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
4.1.2 The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1.3 The option of eight semesters has four streams:
- Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
- Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution.
- Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution.
The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C.
4.2 Content
Modules are classified as either Economics (codes beginning with EC), or Management (codes beginning with BS).
4.2.1 Part A
All the following Part A modules are compulsory.
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Economics Modules: |
|
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics |
20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis |
20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics |
20 |
|
|
Semester 1 Compulsory Business/Management Modules |
|
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting |
10 |
|
|
Semester 2 Compulsory Business/Management Modules |
|
BSA506 Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers |
10 |
4.2.2 Part B
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight: 90 credits):
Semester 1 and 2 Compulsory Economics Modules: |
|
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics |
20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Business/Management Modules: |
|
BSB560 Introduction to Marketing |
10 |
BSB580 Operations Management |
10 |
BSB010 Business Information Management |
10 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Business/Management Modules: |
|
BSB562 The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSB590 Contemporary Business Environment |
10 |
Option |
10 |
Modules should be selected from the Part B Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the part.
4.2.3 Optional Part I (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.2.4 Part C
Compulsory modules (total modular weight: 40 credits):
Semester 1 Compulsory Economics Module: |
|
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics |
20 |
Semester 1 Compulsory Business/Management Module: |
|
BSC070 Technology and Society |
10 |
Semester 2 Compulsory Business/Management Module: |
|
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills |
10 |
Modules should be selected from the Part C Optional Module List made available by the School for this programme to give a total weight of 120 credits for the part.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
5.3 Accreditation for Economics and Management
In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business Studies (2012 entry and 2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA410 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Society |
10 |
ISA412 |
Web Design |
10 |
BSA505 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 |
Introduction to Accounting |
10 |
BSA570 |
Quantitative Methods for Business |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations |
10 |
ISA413 |
Information & Knowledge Organisation & Retrieval |
10 |
BSA506 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA572 |
Statistics and Modelling for Managers |
10 |
BSA526 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information Systems |
20 |
ISB410 |
People Centred Information Systems |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB560 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
ISB301, BSB050, BSB580
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB412 |
Records Management in Organisations |
20 |
ISB413 |
Research Methods |
10 |
BSB572 |
Management Science Methods |
10 |
BSB562 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
BSB012, BSB052, BSB550, BSB590
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC570 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC575 |
Leadership and Interpersonal Skills |
10 |
BSC072 |
Strategic Information Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C. The percentage mark for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final percentage mark.
Programme Specification
BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2014 entry onwards)
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA410 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Society |
10 |
ISA412 |
Web Design |
10 |
BSA505 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 |
Introduction to Accounting |
10 |
BSA570 |
Quantitative Methods for Business |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations |
10 |
ISA413 |
Information & Knowledge Organisation & Retrieval |
10 |
BSA506 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA572 |
Statistics and Modelling for Managers |
10 |
BSA526 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information Systems |
20 |
ISB410 |
People Centred Information Systems |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB560 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
ISB301, BSB050, BSB580
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB412 |
Records Management in Organisations |
20 |
ISB413 |
Research Methods |
10 |
BSB572 |
Management Science Methods |
10 |
BSB562 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
BSB012, BSB052, BSB550, BSB590
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC570 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC575 |
Leadership and Interpersonal Skills |
10 |
BSC072 |
Strategic Information Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2014 entry onwards) New
Academic Year: 2014/15
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA410 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Society |
10 |
ISA412 |
Web Design |
10 |
BSA505 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 |
Introduction to Accounting |
10 |
BSA570 |
Quantitative Methods for Business |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations |
10 |
ISA413 |
Information & Knowledge Organisation & Retrieval |
10 |
BSA506 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA572 |
Statistics and Modelling for Managers |
10 |
BSA526 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information Systems |
20 |
ISB410 |
People Centred Information Systems |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB560 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
ISB301, BSB050, BSB580
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB412 |
Records Management in Organisations |
20 |
ISB413 |
Research Methods |
10 |
BSB572 |
Management Science Methods |
10 |
BSB562 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
BSB012, BSB052, BSB550, BSB590
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC570 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULE (total modular weight 20)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
BSC575 |
Leadership and Interpersonal Skills |
10 |
BSC072 |
Strategic Information Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES
Modules with a total credit rating of 40 over BOTH semesters from Group 1 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically information management modules).
Modules with a total credit weighting of 20 from Group 2 of the Business catalogue of Part C optional modules for this programme (typically management modules).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).